Chrysler 2019 Pacifica van User Guide

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.

To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).

www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com

(U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canadian residents).

Chrysler.com

(U.S.)

Chrysler.ca

(Canada)

©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

3684049_19c_Chry_Pacifica_UG_091018.indd 1

CHRYSLER PACIFICA

2019 USER GUIDE

9/10/18 10:32 AM

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.

It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R TA N T: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/

Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com





If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling

1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.


This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com

(U.S.), www.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L : Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G !

Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

9/10/18 10:32 AM

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US

LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the road.

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.

Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO FIND YOUR

OWNER’S MANUAL

ONLINE

This publication has been prepared as a reference item to help you quickly become acquainted with the most important features and processes of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information and procedures.

This User Guide is not a replacement for the full

Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every operation and procedure possible with your vehicle.

For more detailed descriptions of the topics discussed in this User Guide, as well as information covering features and processes not covered in this

User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.

To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable supplement for your vehicle, follow the appropriate web address below: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html

(U.S. Residents) www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canadian Residents)

FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress on our environment.

1

HOW TO USE THIS

MANUAL

Essential Information

Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be intended as regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text.

The figures in this User Guide are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with the steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirrorlike with respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this User

Guide.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs.

There is always a textual indication of the current chapter at the side of each even page.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning

Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.

WARNINGS AND

CAUTIONS

While reading this User Guide you will find a series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect use of components which could cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed to prevent against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.

2

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC

HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL

ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . 15

How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . 17

To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . 18

Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 21

Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped . . . . . . . 23

Child Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped . . . . 32

4

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 34

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If Equipped . . . 38

HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats . . . . . 39

Head Restraints — Second Row Bench . . . . . . . . 40

Head Restraints — Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 42

Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory

Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 43

EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 45

High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 45

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . 46

Headlight Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . . . 47

Front Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 48

Rear Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . . 50

Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . 59

Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . 63

Opening Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Closing Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Power Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 68

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER

(HOMELINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . . 70

Erasing All The HomeLink Channels . . . . . . . . . 70

Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or

Non-Rolling Code Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door Opener . . 71

Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous

Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button . . . . . 72

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 75

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . 76

Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls . 76

Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . . . . . 77

Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . . . 78

Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features

Screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES . . . . . . . 79

Red Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Yellow Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Yellow Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Green Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

White Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . 87

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

SAFETY

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . 89

Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . 91

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 92

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . 97

Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . 97

Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . 108

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . 147

PARK BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 150

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . 151

Auto Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop . 152

To Start The Engine While In Auto Stop/Start . . . . 153

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . . . 153

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . . . 154

SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . . 159

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . . 159

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

ParkSense Visual Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . 161

ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . 162

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . 164

PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active

Park Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . 165

LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . 166

LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . . . . 167

SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . 172

Recreational Towing — All Models . . . . . . . . . . 172

5

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . 174

BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Jack And Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Equipment Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped . . . . . . . 187

Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire — If Equipped . . . 188

Return Inflatable Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . 190

JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . 197

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . 197

MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . 198

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . 199

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . 201

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 204

6

ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . 220

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Authentic Accessories By Mopar . . . . . . . . . . 225

MULTIMEDIA

CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY . . . . . . 228

Uconnect 4 At A Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Drag & Drop Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . . . . . 232

UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL

INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Reception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Care And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Anti-Theft Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . 236

Uconnect Theater Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Pairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Unpairing The Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Uconnect Theater Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 238


Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From

Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Uconnect Theater Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Using The Rear Video USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Wireless Streaming — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 245

UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free

Calling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile

Phone To The Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . 249

Common Phone Commands (Examples) . . . . . . 252

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call . . . . 252

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Improve

Bluetooth Performance With Your Uconnect

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Voice Text Reply — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 261


Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . 264

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . . 264

In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . . . 264

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . 266

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . 266

In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . 266

INDEX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1 — Multifunction Lever

2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls

3 — Instrument Cluster

4 — Windshield Wiper Lever

5 — Uconnect System

8

Instrument Panel

6 — Glove Compartment 11 — Gear Selector

7 — Front Center Stack AUX Jack and USB Port 12 — Ignition

8 — Climate Controls

9 — Switch Panel

10 — Electronic Park Brake Switch

13 — Speed Controls

14 — Steering Wheel

15 — Headlight Switch

INTERIOR

1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches

2 — Door Handles

3 — Seats

4 — Cup Holder

Interior Features

9

KEYS

Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system uses a receiver module in the vehicle that wirelessly links with the key fob.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm, optional power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob. When any button on the key fob is pushed, or when any signal is being transferred between the key fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will flash as an indicator. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/ unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

10

Key Fob

1 — LED Light

2 — Lock

3 — Remote Start

4 — Right Power Sliding Side Door

5 — Panic Alarm

6 — Emergency Key

7 — Left Power Sliding Side Door

8 — Liftgate

9 — Unlock

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow.

NOTE:

• A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement.

• The key fob LED light brightness is designed for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be visible in direct sunlight.

In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob

(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the

ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.

To Unlock The Doors

NOTE:

Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's side doors on the first push

(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the default setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver front door and sliding door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.

First Push Unlock

2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks

Push and release the unlock button on the key fob twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.

11

Second Push Unlock

NOTE:

Your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry; refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting

To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Emergency Key Feature

The key fob also contains an emergency key. The emergency key is stored in the bottom of the key fob.

Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency

Key

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/ unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, press the mechanical button on the side of the key fob with your thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other hand while pushing the mechanical button.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will flash once and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal. Settings in radio can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in

“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated

Vehicle Key

If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open, the doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick flash of the turn signals.

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Passive Entry

If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the key is inside the passenger compartment.

12

Request For Additional Remote Controls

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.

A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE:

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

KeySense Features — If Equipped

This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to customize vehicle settings that can be applied to determine the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time.

This feature also has additional features that are always enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features.

KeySense Unique Splash Screen

At start-up the KeySense splash screen should inform the driver that the vehicle will be functioning in

KeySense mode when the KeySense key is in use.

Start Up Display Features

• Unique splash screen graphic

• Telltale illuminated

• After unique splash screen, and after stored messages are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed

The following features are always enabled when this key is in use:

• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied

Seat Belts are not Fastened

• Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime

• Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39

• Daytime Running Lights

• Headlights with Wipers

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

• Auto Dim High Beams

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the

Owner’s Manual for further information.

13

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle with the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot on the brake pedal.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are

OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is

START, during start RUN will illuminate.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

The ignition can be placed in the following positions:

OFF

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices are available.

ACC

• The engine is stopped.

• Some electrical devices are available.

ON/RUN

• Driving position.

• All the electrical devices are available.

START

• Start the vehicle.

The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition position or from a remote start request.

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch.

14

Backup Starting Method

NOTE:

The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.

A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

NOTE:

For further information, refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating."

REMOTE STARTING

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of

328 ft (100 m).

The Remote Starting System also activates the Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in temperatures above 80° F (26.7° C), and the optional heated seats, and optional heated steering wheel in temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

15

• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.

• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

• With remote start, the engine will only run for

15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• The vehicle must be started with the key after two consecutive timeouts.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Gear Selector in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Liftgate closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

16

• PANIC button not pushed

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing

• Ignition in STOP/OFF position

• Fuel level meets minimum requirement

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.

• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times

(two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

General Information





NOTE:


VEHICLE SECURITY

ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The vehicle security alarm provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will flash.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the

“OFF” position (refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

• Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive

Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information).

• Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.

• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" under "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further information).

• Hands Free Liftgate passive entry activation (if equipped with Hands Free Liftgate passive entry).

• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

– For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go — Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).

17

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm.

• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound.

• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound.

If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

18

DOORS

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the

Owner’s Manual for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

• The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the hands free or Passive Entry system.

• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, wireless charging pad, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

• If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated approach (low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for the time 0, 30 (default), 60, or

90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn lamps.

To Unlock From The Driver's Side:

With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to unlock the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. The interior door panel rocker knob will rotate when the door is unlocked.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front door handle. To select between

“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All

Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In

Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive

Entry. There are three situations that trigger a

FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:

• A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.

• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a key fob inside the car, and it does not find any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.

NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are met:

• The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.

• There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle.

• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors.

NOTE:

On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob can be locked in the vehicle.

19

To Enter The Liftgate

With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

NOTE:

If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is programmed, only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release handle is pulled. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release handle is pulled. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do Not Grab The Door Handle When

Locking

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead.

20

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button, or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.






NOTE:


Power Sliding Side Door —

If Equipped

The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in several ways:

• Key fob

• Inside or outside handles

• Buttons located:

– In the overhead console

– Just inside the sliding door

– On the outside handle

Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door.

The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature

(if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.

Key Fob Left Side Control Buttons

21

22

Key Fob Right Side Control Buttons Overhead Console Control Buttons

There are power sliding side door switches located on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers.

To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off button, located in the overhead console, to remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off button will return the handles to power operation.

NOTE:

• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.

• If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to obstacles, it will power open on the next command.

WARNING!

Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door.

WARNING!

Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a sliding door or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while driving.

Hands-Free Sliding Doors —

If Equipped

Hands-Free Sliding Doors

To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s).

Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion.

When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door will open almost instantaneously.

This assumes all options are enabled in the radio settings.

NOTE:

• To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks.

• The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate when the transmission is in PARK.

• With every movement of the Hands-Free sliding doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn signals will flash. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information on turning these alerts on or off.

• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.

• If the power sliding doors encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop.

The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s

Manual for further information. The Hands-Free

Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during

Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.

Child Locks

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system.

To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the sliding side door.

2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child

Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection

Door Lock.

23

• To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the overhead console.

When the overhead console power

OFF LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power opened or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding doors or pulling on the handles.

Child Protection Door Locks

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.

NOTE:

• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will not open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.

• The power sliding door will operate from the switch located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position.

24

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened from the inside door handle when the

Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.

To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock

1. Open the sliding side door.

2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.

NOTE:

• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the seatback flat against the seat cushion.

Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped

The second row bench seat can accommodate two passengers, while providing easy access to the third row seats without any folding of the second row seats.

To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion, and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever

Recline Lever

The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is removable for added cargo space.

Removing The Bench Seat

1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats forward to allow room for the bench seat removal.

Folded Position

3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat, in the center near the floor to release the latches.

25

2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original position.

NOTE:

Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the locked position.

3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to the seating position.

WARNING!

If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result.

Release Strap Location

4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire seat toward the front of the vehicle. The seat can now be removed through either sliding side door, or through the lift gate.

Tilt Bench Seat Forward

NOTE:

• Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recommended that two people are utilized for its removal.

• When storing the removed bench seat, it is important to keep the seatback in the folded position.

Reinstalling The Bench Seat

1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats front attachments into the detent positions on the floor.

26

Second Row Removable 8th Seat —

If Equipped

While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable and removable for added cargo space.

The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from the detent positions in the floor.

NOTE:

Seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat stowed in the load floor.

To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original position.

WARNING!

If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result.

Fold-Flat — Quad Seats

To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion.

NOTE:

• The seatback may lock into the fold flat position.

Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.

• When returning the seat to the original position, the headrest must be folded back to the original position.

Easy Entry

Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat

Installed

The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into the third row with or without a child seat installed.

1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a handle that provides easier access to the third row by tilting the seat forward.

2. To put the seat back into original position, just pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into position.

WARNING!

Do not use this feature with a child in seat.

Serious injury or death my occur.

Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat

The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility for passengers to enter and exit the third row.

1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests are folded up.

2. Pull the strap on the back of the seat and the seat will tilt forward.

Easy Tilt Seat Handle

27

Pull Strap

3. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then, pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the arm rests.

Exit For Third Row Passengers

For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor.

NOTE:

This process is for when there is no child seat installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.

Manually Folding Third Row Seats —

If Equipped

1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down.

2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors.

3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin.

To Unfold Third Row Seats

1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch.

2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its full upright position.

3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.

28

WARNING!

• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.

• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.

Stow 'n Go Seating

On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage.

Auto Advance ‘n Return — If Equipped

On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n

Return feature, the front seat will move forward automatically to a location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement, without interference by the front seat. After the second row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back to the previous location once the Auto Advance ‘n Return button is pushed again.

The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to both the front driver and passenger power seats, if equipped.

WARNING!

During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not occupied and the seat travel path is clear.

A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door.

Auto Advance ‘n Return Button

Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature

NOTE:

• The button is only functional when the power sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in instrument cluster display.

• If the power sliding door is closing when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button. The front seat cushion and seat back will move as necessary to a location that will allow space for the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.

2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement. Refer to “Second Row Stow ‘n Go” for further information.

3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button a second time. The front seat cushion and seat back will return to the original starting location.

NOTE:

• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the front power seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto Advance ‘n Return button again will return the front seat to the original starting location.

• The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous location. A message will be displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that an obstacle has been detected.

• If the front seat is already in a location that will allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

• If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will automatically re-calibrate when the Auto Advance

‘n Return button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion moving forward and downward, before moving to the location that will allow space for the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.

29

Second Row Stow 'n Go

For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar. Move the seat back all the way forward using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of the cushion.

For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button located on the B pillar trim (if equipped.)

Refer to "Auto Advance ‘n Return - If Equipped" in this section for instructions.

1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the locked position.

NOTE:

• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.

• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position.

• For information on storage bin function with the seats rearward, refer to “Internal Equipment” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel.

3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats.

Push Panel Forward

4. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by grabbing the strap on the lower part of the seat back, and guide the seat into the tub.

5. Push down on the seat back to lock the seat in the tub.

30

Push To Lock

6. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards by the bottom corner edge of the panel.

7. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.

8. Readjust the front seat as needed.

Refer to “Stow ‘n Go” in “Getting to Know Your

Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

WARNING!

In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched:

• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open.

• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

CAUTION!

• The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.

• Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise damage to the seat may occur.

To Unstow Second Row Seats

For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar.

For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button located on the B pillar trim (if equipped).

Refer to "Auto Advance ‘n Return - If Equipped" in this section for instructions.

1. To access the storage bin, place the lock rod in the locked position.

NOTE:

• Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.

• Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position.

2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel.

3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats.

4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out of the storage bin. Push the seat rearward making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright position and pull the headrest up.

NOTE:

The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back before folding into the upright position.

5. To position the floor panel back into its original state, grab the bottom corner and extend it outward.

6. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks into position. Replace the floor mat as needed.

7. Readjust the front seat as needed.

Refer to “Stow ‘n Go” in “Getting to Know Your

Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

WARNING!

• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.

• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the

31

WARNING!

head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied.

Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —

If Equipped

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

• Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they

32

WARNING!

could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped

The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/ rearward for occupant comfort.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button, the seat will move in the direction of the button push. Release the button when the desired position is reached.

Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat —

If Equipped

A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.

NOTE:

The third row outboard seat belts may interfere with the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to restrain an occupant.

NOTE:

• The outer head restraints will lower automatically as necessary when the power seat begins to move.

• The center head restraint raises and lowers manually but will not lower automatically.

• The head restraint can also be lowered manually using the pull strap located at the back of the seat.

Refer to "Head Restraints - Third Row" in "Head

Restraints" for further information.

The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK.

The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats.

Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel:

Rear Panel Power Switch Bank

1 — Open To Normal

2 — Stow

3 — Fold Forward/Rearward

4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats

To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated) position, push and release the “Normal” button. The seat will automatically stop when the Normal position is reached.

To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push and release the “Stow” button. The seat will automatically stop when the Stow position is reached.

To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or reverse direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/

Back” button. Release the button when the desired position is reached.

NOTE:

1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third row seats.

2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button, place the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow clips located on the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches the desired position, remove the webbing from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain an occupant.

Stowed Seat Belt

3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected.

4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button again.

33

Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped

The Memory Buttons (1) and (2) on the driver's door panel can be programmed to recall the driver's seat, outside mirrors, and radio station preset settings. Your key fobs can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed.

Driver Memory Switch

Your vehicle may have been delivered with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to each of the memory positions.

Programming The Memory Feature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.

4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in

PARK.

• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to

“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless

Entry Key Fob To Memory

Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

NOTE:

Before programming your key fob you must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

To program your key fob, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.

2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.

NOTE:

If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.

3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.

4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.

“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.

34

5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within

10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE:

The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to

5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

To recall the memory settings for driver one, push memory button (1) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, push memory button (2) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory buttons on the driver's door during a recall

(S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat stops moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

NOTE:

Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory mirror recall.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With

Memory Seat Only)

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.

• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.

• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches

(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 –

67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches

(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated

Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position.

NOTE:

The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features within the Uconnect system. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your

Owner’s Manual.

35

Heated Seats

Front Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.

The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for

HI, one for LO and none for off.

once to turn the • Press the heated seat button

HI setting on.

• Press the heated seat button turn the LO setting on.

a second time to

• Press the heated seat button turn the heating elements off.

a third time to

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the

Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater.

It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

WARNING!

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the second row seats are equipped with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels.

36

Second Row Heated Seat Switch

You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.

Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.

Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.

Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements off.

NOTE:

Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately

45 minutes.

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the ventilated seat button choose HI.

once to

• Press the ventilated seat button to choose LO.

• Press the ventilated seat button turn the ventilated seat off.

a second time a third time to

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the

Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual for further information.

37

Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) —

If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with armrests on the front seats. To adjust, push and hold the button while moving to the desired position. Release the button once the desired position is reached.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Adjustable Armrest

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with four-way head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. The front head restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward. To adjust forward, pull the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle to desired position. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull forward on the head restraint to furthest forward position and head restraint will reset to furthest rearward position.

NOTE:

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

38

Front Head Restraint

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

Forward Adjustment

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

WARNING!

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Head Restraints — Second Row Quad

Seats

The second row outboard head restraints, as well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped) have adjustable head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward.

NOTE:

If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints are non-adjustable.

Do not pull on nonadjustable head restraints when folding.

39

Head Restraints — Second Row Bench

The second row bench seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward.

To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Head Restraints — Third Row

The outboard head restraints can be manually folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release strap to fold them forward.

Bench Seat Head Restraint



WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

NOTE:

For child restraint tethering, refer to “Occupant

Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Release Strap

NOTE:

• The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row.

• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats.

40

The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

NOTE:

To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Center Head Restraint



WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.

Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints —

If Equipped

For improved visibility, the third row outboard head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.

Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.

Press the Head Restraint Fold button fold the third row head restraints.

to power

NOTE:

• The head restraints can be folded downward using the Head Restraint button or using the manual release strap. The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row.

• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats.

41

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

ward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or down-

42

Heated Steering Wheel

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting.

Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary depending on the temperature of the environment. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button to turn the heating element on.

• Press the heated steering wheel button second time to turn the heating element off.

once a

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must

WARNING!

exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available

With Memory Seat Only) —

If Equipped

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver's outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side

Mirrors In Reverse position.

NOTE:

The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side

Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the radio touchscreen. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R

(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

NOTE:

If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.

If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold.

43

Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ unfolded.

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Switch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior lights and the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-pass functions.

Headlight Switch

1 — Rotate Headlight Switch

2 — Ambient Dimmer Control

3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

4 — Fog Lamps Button

44

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.

Daytime Running Lights —

If Equipped

The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

High/Low Beam Switch

When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation.

Automatic High Beam — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).

Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

To Activate

1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the

AUTO position.

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position.

Refer to “Multifunction Lever” for further information.

NOTE:

This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or above 16 mph (25 km/h).

To Deactivate

Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the Automatic High Beam system.

1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.

3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from the AUTO to the on position.

NOTE:

Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).

45

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position aligning the indicator with the

AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.

This means your headlights will stay on for up to

90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF.

To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off) position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode.

Headlights On With Wipers —

If Equipped

When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.

NOTE:

The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

Headlight Delay — If Equipped

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.

To activate the delay feature, turn the ignition OFF while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.

When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not remain on. To change the timer setting, select the proper setting through the Uconnect

System.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE:

The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.

46

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

Turn Signal Warning

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver.

WINDSHIELD WIPER

AND WASHERS

Front Wiper Operation

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Fog Light Switch

Washer And Wiper Controls

47

NOTE:

Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is

10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.

Mist Feature

Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the four intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity position 4. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.

48

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Uconnect System.

Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:

• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain

Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON, when the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than

3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above freezing.

• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph

(5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain

Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

Rear Wiper And Washer

Rear Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upwards to operate one of two modes for the rear window wiper:

• First detent — intermittent mode.

• Second detent — continuous mode.

Rear Windshield Washer Operation

Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.

49

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel below the radio.

Automatic Climate Control Overview

Uconnect 4C/4C with 8.4–inch display

NAV Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Controls On The

Faceplate

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display

Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description

MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

NOTE:

The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.

50

Icon

Rear Climate

Description

A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode if not recommended.

AUTO Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after ten minutes.

Rear Climate Control Button

Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are ON.

51

52


Driver And Passenger Temperature UP And DOWN Buttons

Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

Faceplate Knob

MODE

Touchscreen Buttons

Modes Control

MODE

SYNC Button

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.

Blower Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Modes Control

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode.

Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.

Icon

Panel Mode

Bi-Level Mode

Floor Mode

Description

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

53

Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From

The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped

The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front

ATC panel.

To change the rear system settings:

• Press the "REAR CLIMATE" button on the touchscreen to change control to rear control mode, Rear display appears. Control functions now operate rear system.

Icon

REAR AUTO

• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system, press the "Front Climate" or “Done” button on the touchscreen.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel

Rear Control Display

Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control

Display

Description

Rear Auto Button

Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

Rear Lock Button

Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.

Front Climate Button

Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls.

54

Icon

Panel Mode

Description

Rear Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons

Provides the front occupants with the ability to control the rear temperature. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature.

SYNC Button

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE:

The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.

Blower Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.

Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.

Panel Mode

Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

55

Icon

Bi-Level Mode

Floor Mode

Description

Bi-Level Mode

Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.

Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

— If Equipped

The rear ATC system has floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.

Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear

ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.

The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Rear Automatic Climate Controls

1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the rear modes to suit your comfort needs.

2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.

56

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the

ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

Icon

Panel Mode

Bi-Level Mode

Floor Mode

Description

Rear Mode Control

Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.

NOTE:

In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets.

Rear Temperature Control

• Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.

• Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.

57

58


Rear Blower Control

The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.

AUTO Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.

Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

Rear Climate Control/Blower Off

To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only

Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in

Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when

MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.

Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the

AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons.

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

59

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into

Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front

ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

Operating Tips

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032) is recommended. Refer to “Fluids And

Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount,

60 type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to

“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for proper coolant selection. Use of the air

Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high.

This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves.

Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/C Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to an authorized dealer for filter replacement instructions.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

You can control either the front or rear windows using controls located on the driver's door trim panel.

The driver may lock out the rear power windows by pushing the bar control just below the power window controls.

The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

Driver’s Power Window Controls

1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window

Controls

2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls

3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If

Equipped

NOTE:

Power Window controls will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.

There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —

If Equipped

The front driver and front passenger controls may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window control fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the control briefly.

61

To close the window part way, lift the window control to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window control again to close the window.

• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the control lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually.

Sliding Side Door Power Window Control —

If Equipped

Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single control on the door handle assembly.

The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

NOTE:

The controls will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout.

NOTE:

The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping several inches above the window sill.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing.

Sliding Door Power Window Switch

62

PANORAMIC SUNROOF

— IF EQUIPPED

Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade

Switches

1 — Sunroof Switch

2 — Power Shade Switch

The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console.

The Power Shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.

Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.

You could also be seriously injured or killed.

Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening Sunroof

Express Mode

Push the switch rearward and release it within one second. The sunroof will open automatically from any position and stop at the full open position. This is called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening.

Manual Mode

Push and hold the switch rearward and the sunroof will open to the full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the "Vent" button within one second and the sunroof will open to the vent position.

This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position.

63

NOTE:

If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.

Closing Sunroof

Express Mode

Push the switch forward and release it within one second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.”

During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Power Sun Shade — If Equipped

The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half-open position regardless of express or manual open operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue to the full-open position.

Opening Power Shade — Express Mode

Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it within one second and the sunshade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and release the switch again from the half-open position and the sunshade will open to the full-open position and stop automatically. This is called “Express

Open.” During Express open operation, any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.

Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode

Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward and the shade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again.

Closing Power Shade — Express Mode

Push the switch forward and release it within one second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the shade.

NOTE:

If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely.

Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode

To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed again.

64

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation.

If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.

NOTE:

If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in

Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE:

Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in


HOOD

Opening

The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.

3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The lever is located behind the center front edge of the hood.

Safety Latch Release Lever Location

4. Lift the hood. While holding the hood up, remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it into the seat located on the underside of the hood.

NOTE:

• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are not in motion and not in the lifted position.

65

• While lifting the hood, use both hands.

• Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmission must be in PARK.

Closing

1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.

2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately

12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.

Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.

CAUTION!

Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

LIFTGATE

Opening

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate may be released in several ways:

• Overhead console liftgate button

• Key fob

• Outside handle

Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate.

The key fob and the overhead console button will release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the outside handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate.

Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry

NOTE:

If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive Entry handle activation. If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in

Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with handle activation. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in


66

Closing

To Close The Liftgate

Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes over the closing effort.

To Lock The Vehicle

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

Power Liftgate — If Equipped

The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several ways:

• Overhead console liftgate button

• Key fob

• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)

• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim

(when liftgate is open)

• Hands-Free Liftgate (opens liftgate only) — If

Equipped

Using the above ways:

• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open

• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close

• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse

Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead

Console to open or close the liftgate.

Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the liftgate.

Overhead Console Power Switches

1 — Liftgate

2 — Right Sliding Door

3 — Sliding Door Power Off

4 — Left Sliding Door

The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.

If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, depressing the touch pad on the outside handle or

67

Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive

Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.

NOTE:

• To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive

Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.

• If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If

1st Press of key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with hands-free activation.

• Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings.

• Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

To Close The Liftgate

The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.

Lock The Vehicle

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle.

Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped

Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone

To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle activation zone in the general location below

68 the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion.

Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow

Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the

Power Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the receiver. Use a straight kicking motion under either activation zone to open the Hands-

Free Liftgate.

Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation

Zones

When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open after approximately one second.

This assumes all options are enabled in the radio.

NOTE:

To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid

Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within

5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.

CAUTION!

The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the

Owner’s Manual for further information. The

Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle

Service.

• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.

• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually.

• The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.

• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.

NOTE:

• The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the transmission is in PARK.

• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.

WARNING!

• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.

• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at

WARNING!

high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.

NOTE:

Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction.

WARNING!

During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.

69

UNIVERSAL GARAGE

DOOR OPENER

(HOMELINK )

HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light

• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate the three different HomeLink channels.

• To operate HomeLink, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink buttons. These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink button.

• The HomeLink indicator light is located above the center button.

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your

HomeLink button to.

Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your HomeLink before you use it for the first time.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

70

Erasing All The HomeLink Channels

To erase the channels, follow this procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the

HomeLink indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

Identifying Whether You Have A

Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code

Device

Before programming a device to one of your

HomeLink buttons, you must determine whether the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.

Rolling Code Devices

To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes.

A device with a rolling code will also have a

“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly by manufacturer.

NOTE:

The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you normally use to operate the device.

Non-rolling Code Devices

Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

Programming HomeLink To A Garage

Door Opener

To program any of the HomeLink buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, follow the steps below:

NOTE:

All HomeLink buttons are programmed using this procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when programming additional buttons.

1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to

3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program, while keeping the

HomeLink indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the

HomeLink indicator light. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.

Once this happens, release both buttons.

NOTE:

Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ non-rolling code final steps.

Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.

1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the

“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.

2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete.

3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure.

Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final

Steps

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the HomeLink indicator light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete.

2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.

71

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.

• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed.

Programming HomeLink To A

Miscellaneous Device

Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage

Door Opener” for the procedure on how to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it follows the same procedure. Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the programming process.

NOTE:

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for

HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be preformed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your

HomeLink buttons.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink

Button

To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has been previously trained, without erasing all the channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to determine whether the new device you want to program the HomeLink button to has a Rolling

Code, or Non-rolling Code.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to flash after

20 seconds.

Do not release the button.

3.

Without releasing the button , proceed with

Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A Garage

Door Opener” and follow all remaining steps.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



NOTE:


72

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Power Outlets

Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB power outlets, that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a

“key” are powered when the ignition is in the ON or

ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.

NOTE:

• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

CAUTION!

the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

The front power outlet is located at the bottom of the instrument panel.

CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow

12 Volt Front Power Outlet

In addition to the front power outlets, there is also a power outlet located in the rear cargo area.

Rear Power Outlet

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

73

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

Power Inverter — If Equipped

There is a 115 or 230 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of seats to convert DC current to

AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices

115 Volt Power Inverter

The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off when the device is plugged in or removed.

The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter it will automatically reset.

To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power

Inverter.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

Cigar Lighter — If Equipped

NOTE:

Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized dealer through Mopar parts.

The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.

After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its initial position and is ready to be used.

74

WARNING!

When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.

CAUTION!

Do not connect devices with power higher than

180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors.

If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.

Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped

With the optional authorized dealer-installed

Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center floor console. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Push the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.

The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.

75

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY

Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position

(and the key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and sub-menus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.

Instrument Cluster Display Location

And Controls

The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster), which offers useful information to the driver.

76

Instrument Cluster Display

The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver to select information by pushing the directional buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

• Up Arrow Button

Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items.

• Down Arrow Button

Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items.

• Right Arrow Button

Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.

• Left Arrow Button

Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.

• OK Button

Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Oil Life Reset

• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

• Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.

• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset Procedure

Without pressing the brake pedal, push the EN-

GINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)

1. Push and release the up or down arrow button to scroll through the driver interactive display until the “Vehicle Info” menu is highlighted.

2. Push the left or right arrow button to access the

“Oil Life” submenu.

3. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to

100%.

Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

KeySense Cluster Messages —

If Equipped

When the KeySense key is in use there will be:

• Continuous, dedicated telltale

• Unique Display Splash Screen

With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table:

77

Setting

None – With vehicle ignition ON

Max Vehicle Speed

Start Up Fuel Alert message

Early Low Fuel Alert Message

ParkSense

Blind Spot

Forward Collision Warning

Instrument Cluster Display Message

“KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”

• “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime

• “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km” supported by a chime

“Range to empty xxx miles or km”

“Fuel Low”

“Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”



Instrument Cluster Display Menu

Items

The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main menu items for several features. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display menu options until the desired menu is reached.

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s

Manual for further information.

Instrument Cluster Display

Programmable Features Screen Setup

Push the up or down arrow button to scroll through the Menu Items until the Screen Setup displays in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button to enter Screen Setup. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster display as well as the location that information is displayed.

Configurable Screen Setup Menu Titles

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Time

• Trip A Distance

• Trip B Distance

• Audio Info

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Odometer

• Menu Title

• Speedometer (Digital

Speed) select between

MPH/km

• Defaults (Restore/

Cancel)

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s


78

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

Red Warning Lights

— Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

— Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning

Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

79

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake

Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the

OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds.

The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

— Door Open Warning Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This indicator will reflect which doors are open.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position.

The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/ rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check.

If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

80

— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off.

Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

— Hood Open Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.

NOTE:


— Liftgate Open Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.

NOTE:


— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

— Transmission Temperature Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or

NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

81

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

— Vehicle Security Warning Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

— Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as

82 possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Yellow Warning Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Fault Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”

Light

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning

This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the

Brake Warning Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the

Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off

Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Active Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will indicate when the Electronic

Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an

ESC event.

— Service LaneSense Warning Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the Lane-

Sense system is not operating and requires service.

Please see an authorized dealer.

— LaneSense Warning Light —

If Equipped

The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker.

Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting

And Operating” for further information.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.85 gal

(7 L) this warning light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel

Warning.

— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —

If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.

83

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

— Service Forward Collision Warning

(FCW) Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in

"Safety" for further information.

— Service Stop/Start System Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/

Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

CAUTION!

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

84

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

Yellow Indicator Lights

— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning is off.

Green Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set

With Target Vehicle Detected Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target vehicle is detected.

Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set

With No Target Detected Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no target vehicle detected.

Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

85

— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Front Fog Indicator Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

— KeySense Indicator Light —

If Equipped

The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a Key-

Sense key is detected upon startup of the vehicle.

The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the KeySense profile.

Refer to “Keys" in “Getting to Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

— LaneSense Indicator Light —

If Equipped

The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs.



— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/

Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

— Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash.

Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

86

Blue Indicator Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward

(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

White Indicator Lights

— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Ready Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned on but not set.

Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— Cruise Control Ready Indicator

This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

— LaneSense Indicator Light —

If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.



— Set Speed Display

The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the set speed for the Speed Control and Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) settings.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.

87

CAUTION!

• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driverbehavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

WARNING!

• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in

“Multimedia”.

88

AUXILIARY DRIVING

SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).

The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher, and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

Rear Detection Zones

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a blind spot zone.

Blind Spot Warning Light

The BSM system can also be configured to sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to notify you of objects that have entered the detection zones.

89

Rear Cross Path (RCP)

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph

(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.

NOTE:

In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if the host vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite direction.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.

WARNING!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Modes Of Operation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. How-

90 ever, when the system is operating in Rear Cross

Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.

Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/ hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.

Blind Spot Alert Off

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE:

• The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.

• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the

Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Refer to “KeySense Cluster Messages" in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.





1. This device may not cause harmful interference.


NOTE:


Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible and visual warnings within the instrument cluster display, to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision.

The warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings.

Turning FCW On Or Off

The forward collision button is located in the

Uconnect display in the controls settings.

• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision button once to turn the system off.

• To turn the FCW system back on, press the forward collision button again to turn the system on.

NOTE:

• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.

• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to

“off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Changing FCW Status

The FCW feature has three settings and can be changed within the Uconnect System Screen:

• Far

• Medium

• Near

91

Far

The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a collision.

More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.

NOTE:

This setting gives you the most reaction time.

Medium

The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and “Warning And Braking” is in the “on” setting.

This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/ visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.

Near

Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a potential frontal collision when you are much closer.

This setting provides less reaction time than the

“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.

More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.

NOTE:

Changing the “Warning And Braking” status to

“off” prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. “Warning And Braking” can be turned “off” in the Uconnect controls settings.

Refer to the Owner's Manual for further information.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can

FCW detect every type of potential collision.

The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.







NOTE:


Tire Pressure Monitor System

(TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

92

NOTE:

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message, when this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).

This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing and Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.

The system will automatically update and the

TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to

20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.”

Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the

TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use

93

CAUTION!

OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature operation.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS Warning Light.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Premium System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors

• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages, which display in the instrument cluster

• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warnings

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.

94

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.

Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SER-

VICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the

TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the lowpressure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning

Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

95

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SER-

VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.

96

To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)

Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the

TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.

Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with

TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-

TEM” message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the

"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.




(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:


OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat in a rear seating position.

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rearfacing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (Refer to

“Child Restraints” in this section for further information).

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

97

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or

ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the

Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The

BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on

98 vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat

(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t de-

WARNING!

ploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You

WARNING!

might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat

99

WARNING!

belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.

Wear your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap

WARNING!

and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat

(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Seat Belt

1 — Seat Belt

2 — Seat Belt Buckle

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too

100

tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.

A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing

180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

101

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.

The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third

Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions

The second row center (if equipped) and third row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.

The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind the second or third row seat.

Mini-Latch Stowage

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”

102

Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.

The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the minilatch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

103

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt

Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat

Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions.

WARNING!

Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

104

Energy Management Feature

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to

“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Automatic



105

8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) Locations


If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts.

Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case

106 and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking

Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!



WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

WARNING!

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats.

The locked mode is only used to install rearfacing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped

The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat normally. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.

Seat Belt Park Stitch Location

Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant.

Third Row Stow Clip

WARNING!

Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result.

107

Supplemental Restraint Systems

(SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag

System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

108

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning

Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words

“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags

2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/

Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag

3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-

109

WARNING!

ably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.



Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air

Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger

Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause

WARNING!

harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage

— for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

110

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) —

Front Passenger Seat

The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the following:


• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and

Sensor located in the front passenger seat


Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and

Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The

Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag deployment based on occupant classification.

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.

The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced

Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:

• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or

• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rearfacing child restraint; or

• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.


Occupant Status

Rear-facing child restraint

Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*

Front Passenger Air

Bag Output

Reduced-power deployment

Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment

111


Occupant Status

Properly seated adult

Unoccupied seat

Front Passenger Air

Bag Output

Full-power deployment

OR reduced-power deployment

Reduced-power deployment

WARNING!



WARNING!

• Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. The

ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.

In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:

• Sitting upright

• Facing forward

• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor

• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seatback in an upright position

Seated Properly

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small

Adults)

When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the

OCS is working improperly.

Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat

The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The

OCS determines the most probable classification

112

of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the

Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.

Examples of improper front passenger seating include:

• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).

• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.

• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright position.

• The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).

• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.

• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.

• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

• Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight.

The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:

Not Seated Properly



113


WARNING!

• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input.

This may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.

114

WARNING!

• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.

• Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.

The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system.

If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately.

The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the

OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

The following requirements must be strictly followed:

• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.

• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.

• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.

• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.

• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US

LLC.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FM-

VSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (CMVSS).

• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger

Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver

Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-

Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats.

The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-

BAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

115

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side

Air Bag

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The

SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air

Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtain (SABIC) Label Location

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated

116

properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!

• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.

• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) determines whether the deployment of the

Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.

The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air

Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats.

Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

117

WARNING!

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side

Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether de-

118 ployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:



• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

• Occupant Classification System

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.

They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smokelike particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat.

If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor.

If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant

Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the

ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced

Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)

• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If

Equipped)

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response

System.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:

• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC

Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door

• Cut off battery power to the:

– Engine

– Electric Motor (if equipped)

– Electric power steering

– Brake booster

– Electric park brake

– Automatic transmission gear selector

– Horn

– Front wiper

– Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below.

If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

119

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response

System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/

RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone

WARNING!

who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that

120

have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable

Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to http:// www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:

1–888–327–4236

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport

Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle

121

Larger Children

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.

Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

122

WARNING!



WARNING!

Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg

WARNING!

may not function as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may be more severely injured as a result.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forwardfacing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

WARNING!

directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

123

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint

LATCH – Lower Anchors Only

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether

Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Restraint

Rear-Facing Child Restraint

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

X

X X

X

124

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The

LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions

— Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 anchorages per seating position)

— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

125

7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seat LATCH

Positions



8 Passenger LATCH Positions



Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

126

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

No

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

No

Yes

Yes

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable.

Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it.

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision.

127

the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded

1 – Folded Headrest

2 – Child Restraint

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into

128

LATCH Anchorages

(Second Row Anchorages Shown)

7 Passenger Stow n’ Go Seating


(Second Row Anchorages Shown)

8 Passenger Seating


(Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown)

7 Passenger Bench Seating


(Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages located behind all second row seating positions. The third row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat for either the center or left outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near the floor.

Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row

7 Passenger Bench Anchorage Shown)

Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row

8 Passenger Anchorage Shown)

129

Center Seat LATCH

This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B and C.

This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.

130

Tether Strap Anchorages

(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow n’ Go

Anchorage Shown)

Tether Strap Anchorages

(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH Positions

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCHcompatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCHcompatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to

"To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint" for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the

Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether

Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch

(25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the

131

child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle

Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The

ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.

Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle

7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic


ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

= Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

132

7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Automatic



Retractor


8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) Locations


Retractor


What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

133

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Frequently Asked Questions

Yes

Yes

No

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row

Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable.

Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

NOTE:

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it.

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision.

134

Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded

1 – Folded Headrest

2 – Child Restraint

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rearmost position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.

This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic

Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

135

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch

(25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped

The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat following the steps above. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.

If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature.

Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in the steps above or move the car seat to a different seating position.

Seat Belt Park Stitch

Seat Belt Park Stitch Location

136

Installing Child Restraints Using the Top

Tether Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.

Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint

System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row

8 Passenger

Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row

7 Passenger Bench

Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjust-

137

able rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Third Row Tether Attachment

The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time.

To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage for either seating position on the 60% third row seat:

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.

Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment

(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow n’ Go

Anchorage Shown)

138

2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard (left) side of the head restraint support posts, as shown in the diagram.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row

Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row

WARNING!

Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child restraint to the tether anchorage on the

60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one child restraint at a time.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE

CARGO AREA.

WARNING!


• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/ liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control

BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO

NOT use the recirculation mode.

139

WARNING!

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make

Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged

(i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.

Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.

Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

140

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING

FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.

• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat

(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to

WARNING!

the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should

Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

141

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls.

Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

142

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.

A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/

RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.


Start the engine with the gear selector in the PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

Normal Starting

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions —

With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In

PARK Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF,

ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster will display “ACC”),

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN position

(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”),

• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position

(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).

NOTE:

Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time.

If pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display in the instru-

143

ment cluster. For further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel”.

AutoPark

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.

WARNING!

• Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A

VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster display and near the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your

WARNING!

vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the Instrument Cluster Display and on the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The rotary shifter will automatically reset itself to the PARK position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF position (Engine OFF). When AutoPark is activated the instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark Engaged”

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector

• Vehicle is not in PARK

• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less

144

• Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP

BUTTON

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake

SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions. Please reference SAFE HOLD pages for additional information regarding this function.

CAUTION!

Engine will remain running.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector



• Driver’s door is ajar

• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled

• Brake Pedal is not depressed

The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged ” will display in the instrument cluster.

AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode

• AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:

• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter



• Driver’s door is ajar

• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or Brake Pedal is not depressed

The MESSAGE “ AutoPark Engaged ” will display in the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of

WARNING!

PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.

• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEU-

TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply

WARNING!

the parking brake, shift the transmission into

PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle

(or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

145

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or

NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the park brake switch momentarily.

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may Park.

Park will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is

1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.

The MESSAGE “ Vehicle Speed is Too High to

Shift to P ” will display in the Instrument Cluster

Display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).

The gear position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

WARNING!

If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) and the above condition are met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.

As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

To Turn Off The Engine Using

ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE

START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE:

If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.

146

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.

Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

PARK BRAKE

Electric Park Brake (EPB)

Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake

System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful. The Electric

Park Brake Switch is located in the integrated center stack.

Electric Park Brake Switch

To engage the park brake manually, push the Electric Park Brake Switch.

To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momentarily.

147

The parking brake will disengage automatically when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTE:

• You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages or disengages.

• Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the

BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate.

Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the

BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.

• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you are engaging or disengaging the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement.

• The park brake can be engaged even when the ignition switch is OFF. However, it can only be disengaged when the ignition switch is in the ON/

RUN position.

• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.

• Refer to “Parking Brake” in “Starting And Operating” located in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

WARNING!


• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking

WARNING!

brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,

(or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/


• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system

148

CAUTION!

malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

SafeHold

SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park

Brake System that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from rolling.

SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door is open and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again.

AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

WARNING!




• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.


TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

WARNING!

speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into



• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children

149

WARNING!

should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.


(or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center stack. The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.

Push down on the gear selector and then rotate to access the L position.

Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake.

• Shift the transmission into PARK.

• Turn the ignition OFF.

• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

Transmission Gear Selector

To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.

NOTE:

You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at low speeds).

150

WARNING!




• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to

WARNING!

a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.


TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into


WARNING!


• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.


(or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/


STOP/START SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the engine.

This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.

Auto Stop/Start

NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/

START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.

151

To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following

Must Occur:

• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster within the

Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

• The vehicle must be completely stopped.

• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained throughout the

Auto Stop/Start process.

Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting

And Operating” section located in your Owner’s


Possible Reasons The Engine Does

Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/

Start screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop:

• If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/

Start Off button.

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Driver’s door is not closed.

• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.

• Battery charge is low. During this time a message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging".

• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.

• HVAC set to MAX A/C.

• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.

• The transmission is not in a forward gear.

• Hood is open.

• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.

Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:

• Accelerator pedal input.

• Engine temp too high.

• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AU-

TOSTOP.

• Steering angle beyond threshold.

• ACC is on and speed is set.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

152

To Start The Engine While In Auto

Stop/Start

While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically reengage upon engine restart.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start

Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:

• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.

• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.

• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually adjusted.

• Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging".

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).

• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.

• A STOP/START system error occurs.

To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start

System

Stop/Start Button

1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the instrument panel). The light on the switch will illuminate.

2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to or “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the

STOP/START system) the engine will not be stopped.

4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.

Automatic Shutdown

This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown feature. If the vehicle is left in READY mode

(vehicle running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour after the driver exits, this feature will automatically turn the vehicle off. Notifications have been added into this feature to raise awareness of the timed event:

• In the interior of the vehicle, the instrument cluster will display “Ready To Drive”, and will be accompanied by three audible chimes while exiting.

These interior warnings will occur regardless of whether the key fob remains in the vehicle or is removed.

• For the exterior of the vehicle, the horn will sound three times if the fob is removed from the vehicle and the vehicle is in the “READY” mode.

153

Please consider this feature when intentionally running the vehicle for extended periods of time over one hour. To restart the vehicle, follow the normal vehicle starting process.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out (shut down) after an initial 30 minutes of inactivity, followed by the additional amount of time for power accessory delay selected in the radio settings menu. Once the vehicle times out, it will switch to the OFF position.

To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start

System

After turning off the STOP/START system, push the STOP/START OFF switch again (located on the instrument panel). The light on the switch will turn off.

For complete details on the Stop/Start System, refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting And

Operating” section located in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

Speed Control Switches

1 — Push SET (+)/Accel

2 — Push RES/Resume

3 — Push SET (-)/Decel

4 — Push On/Off

5 — Push CANC/Cancel

NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed

Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control

154

System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed

Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

To Activate

Push the On/Off button to activate the Speed

Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the On/Off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident.

Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or

SET (-) button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.

Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC

(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to

OFF, erases the set speed from memory.

155

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (ACC ) —

IF EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Switches

1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off

2 — Distance Setting – Decrease

3 — Distance Setting – Increase

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.

Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:

• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.

• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

WARNING!

• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active

WARNING!

driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.

Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

• The ACC system:

• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.

• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

156

WARNING!

• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.

You should switch off the ACC system:

• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

To Activate/Deactivate

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”

To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) Off.”

WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired ACC Speed

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed.

If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below

20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:

• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster display.

• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

To Resume

If there is a set speed in memory push the RES

(resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two seconds, then the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.

157

• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster


Panel” in the Owner’s Manual. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a

1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a

1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster


Panel” in the Owner’s Manual. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.

(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a

1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a

1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:

• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.

158

• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the powertrain braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.

• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.

• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range

(overheated).

Setting The Following Distance In ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.

To increase the distance setting, push the Distance

Setting — Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).

To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance

Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

General Information






NOTE:


Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control

Mode

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above

20 mph (32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed

Speed) Cruise Control mode.

159

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:

• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button is pushed.

• The ignition is turned OFF.

• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed.

Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further information.

PARKSENSE REAR PARK

ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning

ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense

Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.

• The automatic braking function may not provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake capability.

• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.

• The automatic braking function can be enabled/ disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.

• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.

160

• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements.

Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately

7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense Visual Alert

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the

Customer - Programmable Features section of the


“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your

Owner’s Manual for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when

ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The

ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

161

NOTE:

When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense

System will reject customer input to turn the system off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature

Cannot be Disabled" message.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

• When you move the gear selector to the RE-

VERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show “PARKSENSE

OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in

REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

162

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches

(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other

WARNING!

vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily

CAUTION!

detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND

REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle.

NOTE:

• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal, turning

ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available.

• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense

Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.

• The automatic braking function may not provide enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake capability.

• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or right sides.

• The automatic braking function can be enabled/ disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.

• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state for the automatic braking function through ignition cycles.

The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle.


• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements.

Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in

“Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s Manual for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in

REVERSE and above the system's operating

163

speed, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.

The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately

12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your

Owner’s Manual for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The ParkSense switch LED will be on when

ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The

ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

NOTE:

When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense

System will reject customer input to turn the system off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster display will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature

Cannot be Disabled" message.

PARKSENSE ACTIVE

PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The

ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as

“semi-automatic” since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).

164

NOTE:

• The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required.


• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver.

• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.

environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).

• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the

ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature. The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.

Enabling And Disabling The

ParkSense Active Park Assist System

The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once

(LED turns on).

To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again

(LED turns off).

When the ParkSense Active Park Assist System is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching — Push

OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side of the steering wheel to change your parking space setting. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.

Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further information.

LANESENSE —

IF EQUIPPED

LaneSense Operation

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking

(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument clus-

165

ter display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.

NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met, the

LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will turn off if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.

Turning LaneSense On Or Off

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A

“LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the Lane-

Sense button again (LED turns on).

NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

LaneSense Warning Message

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.

Instrument Cluster Display

When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale solid white.

is

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the Lane-

Sense Telltale is solid white only when the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the left side.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the visual warning in the instrument cluster display will show the left inside lane line flashing

166 yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the left of the display will remain solid yellow. The

LaneSense telltale to flashing yellow.

changes from solid white

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected

• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The

LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the similar behavior for a right lane departure.

Changing LaneSense Status

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph

(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.

• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (antilock brakes, traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).

PARKVIEW REAR BACK

UP CAMERA

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into

REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note

“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.

NOTE:

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into

PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

A touch screen button to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button personalization entry in the camera settings menu.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

167

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.

SURROUND VIEW

CAMERA SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround

View Camera System that allows you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is selected through the "on screen soft buttons". The top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View

Camera System is comprised of four sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors.

NOTE:

The Surround View Camera System has programmable settings that may be selected through the



When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera view and top view is the default view of the system.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into

PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. There is a touch screen button (X) to disable the display of the camera image.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited and the last known screen appears again.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side view mirrors and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

168

Modes Of Operation

“Manual” activation of the Surround View camera is selected by pressing the Surround View Camera soft key located in the “Controls” screen within the

Uconnect system.

Top View

The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with

Rear View and Front View in a split view display.

There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object.

NOTE:

• Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.

• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will appear distorted.

• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.

• Open front doors will remove outside image.

Rear View

This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE and is paired with a Top view of the vehicle with active guide lines for the projected path when enabled.

Rear Cross Path View

Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system.

The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.

Front View

The Front view will show you what is immediately in front of the vehicle with guide lines for the projected path when enabled.

Front Cross Path View

Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the front camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.

Deactivation

The system can be deactivated in the following conditions:

• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than

8 mph (13 km/h).

• The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different gear.

• If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE, press the “X” button.

• The camera delay system is turned off manually through the Uconnect settings menu. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

NOTE:

• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.

• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see your nearest authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Surround View Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

169

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only be used as a parking aid. The

Surround View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using Surround View.

WARNING!

fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.

• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle.

You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.

REFUELING THE

VEHICLE

There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seal the system.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.

• Never add fuel when the engine is running.

This is in violation of most state and federal

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.

1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.

2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door

(3 o'clock position) and release to open.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while refueling.

4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.

6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.

170

7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.

Fuel Filler Cap Latch

NOTE:

• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice build up.

• Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills.

Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of

TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com

for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

TRAILER TOWING

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Trailer Tow Package

3.6L/Automatic

Yes

No

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

8,600 lbs (3,900 kg)

6,500 lbs (2,948 kg)

Frontal Area

40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)

40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Max. GTW (Gross Trailer

Weight)

3,600 lbs (1,632 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)

Max. Tongue Weight

360 lbs (163 kg)

149 lbs (67 kg)

NOTE:

The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

171

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow

On Trailer

Wheel OFF The Ground

NONE

Front

Rear

ALL

All Models

NOT ALLOWED

OK

NOT ALLOWED

OK

NOTE:

• To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect

Settings.

• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial towing service, please refer to “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.

Recreational Towing — All Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is

CAUTION!

not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Apply the park brake.

4. Place the transmission in PARK.

172

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start the vehicle.

8. Press and hold the brake pedal.

9. Release the park brake.

10. Turn the ignition OFF.

11. Release the brake pedal.

173

HAZARD WARNING

FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard

Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs

Lamps

Center & Rear Dome

Lamp

Center & Rear Reading

Lamps

Front Door Courtesy

Lamp

Front Header Reading

Lamps – If Equipped

Instrument Cluster

Lamps

Liftgate Lamp(s)

Overhead Console

Reading Lamps

Removable Console

Lamp – If Equipped

Visor Vanity Lamps

Bulb Number

LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)








6501966

Exterior Bulbs

Lamps

High Intensity Discharge Headlamp

Halogen Headlamp

Dedicated Daytime

Running Lamp (If

Equipped)

Front Turn Signal

Lamp

Side Marker Lamp

Front Park Lamp

Front Fog Lamp

LED Front Fog

Lamp

Center High

Mounted Stop

(CHMSL) Lamp

Bulb Number

Low Beam - D3S

High Beam - 9005LL

Reflector Low Beam -

H11LL

Projector Halogen Low

Beam - 9005HL+

All High Beams - 9005LL

LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

PWY24WNA (If Halogen

Headlamp Equipped)

PWY24WSV (If HID

Headlamp Equipped)

W3W

PWY24WNA (If Bulb

Equipped)


H11LL



174

Lamps

Stop/Turn Signal

Lamp

Rear Tail/Side

Marker Lamp

Backup Lamp

License Lamp

Bulb Number

W21/5WLL

Rear Tail - Body Side -

W21/5WLL (If Bulb

Equipped); LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Rear Tail - Liftgate -

W5WLL (If Bulb

Equipped); LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)

Rear Side Marker: W3W

W21W


FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.

Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a

WARNING!

circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems

(air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Underhood Fuses

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure engine is turned off.

Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the usage of screw drivers or any other tool to remove the cover, since they may apply excessive force and result in a broken/damaged part.

After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks.

Power Distribution Center

175

F15

F16

F17

F18

F19

F11

F12

F13

F14

Cavity

F06

F07

F08

F09

F10

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25A

F25B

F26

F27

176

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

40 Amp Green

–

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

25 Amp Clear

–

25 Amp Clear

–

–

–

–

–

40 Amp Green

25 Amp Clear

Blade Fuse

–

25 Amp Clear

–

25 Amp Clear

–

–

5 Amp Tan

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

–

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

Description

Not Used

Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector

Not Used

Amplifier/Active Noise Control

Not Used

Not Used

Battery Sensor (IBS)

ECM (ESS Only)

ECM

CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)

ECM

Starter

CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)

2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT

A/C Compressor Clutch

2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT

Not Used

Not used

RR Wiper

Handsfree LT & RT RR Door Release Mod

Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror

Front HVAC Blower Motor

RR Slide Door Module-RT

F35

F36

F37

F38

F39

F31

F32

F33

F34

Cavity

F28A

F28B

F29

F30A

F30B

F40

F41

F42

F43

F44

F45

F46

F47

F48

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Blue

30 Amp Pink

25 Amp Clear

25 Amp Clear

–

40 Amp Green

60 Amp Yellow

25 Amp Clear

–

–

40 Amp Green

–

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

–

Blade Fuse

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

–

–

–

Description

Diagnostic Report

USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port

Not Used

Media HUB 1&2

PWR Lumbar SW

Not Used

ECM

Power Liftgate Module

RR Door Module-LT

Sunroof Control Module

Not Used

CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)

Vacuum Cleaner

Rear HVAC Blower Motor

Not Used

Not Used

Folding Seat Module

Fuel Pump Motor

CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)

Power Inverter

Driver Door Module

Passenger Door Module

Not Used

177

Cavity

F49

F50

F51

F52

F53

F54

F55A

F55B

F56A

F62

F63

F64

F65

F66

F56B

F57

F58

F59

F60

F61

178

Cartridge Fuse

25 Amp Clear

25 Amp Clear

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

–

40 Amp Green

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Blade Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

20 Amp Yellow

15 Amp Blue

–

15 Amp Blue

Description

RR Sliding Door Module-LT

RR Door Module-RT

Front Wiper

Brake Vacuum Pump

Not Used

ESP-ECU And Valves

Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic

Steering Lock-BUX ONLY)

DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM

Front and Rear HVAC Control Module / Occupant Classification

Module (OCM)/Electronic Steering Lock (ESL)

ESP/ESC

Not Used

Not Used

Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped

Rear Cargo APO

Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn — If Equipped

Not Used

Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn — If Equipped

RT HID Headlamp

Not Used

Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/SGW

Cavity

F67

F68

F69

F70

F71

F72

F73

F74

F75

F76

F77A

F77B

F78A

F78B

F79

F80

F81

F82

F83

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

20 Amp Blue

30 Amp Pink

Blade Fuse

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

–

5 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

–

–

–

–

–

Description

Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) / Parktronics System

(PTS)/Drivers Assist System Module (DASM)

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Horn

Heated Mirrors – If Equipped

Rear Defroster (EBL)

Trailer Tow Backup

Overhead Console / RR ISC

Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics

RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB

Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge Only/Vaccum Cleaner SW/

3rd Row Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go SW/LT & RT Sliding

Door SW Backlight

Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM

Transmission Control Module (TCM)/ E-Shifter

Instrument Cluster

ICS/Front And Rear HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

TT Park Lights — If Equipped

Headlamp Washer Pump — If Equipped

179

Cavity

F84

F85

F86

F87

F88

F89

F90

F91

F92

F93

F94

F95A

F95B

F96

F97

F98

F99

F100A

F100B

CB1

CB2

180

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

40 Amp Green

–

–

–

–

–

30 Amp Pink

–

–

25 Amp

25 Amp *

Blade Fuse

–

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

15 Amp Blue

5 Amp Tan

–

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

Circuit Breakers

Description

Not Used

Cigar Lighter

Not Used

Not Used

Front Heated Seats

Rear Heated Seats

Not Used

Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering Wheel

Security Gateway

Not Used

ESC Motor Pump

USB Charge Port — ACC RUN

Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP (Direct) B+

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)

Left HID Headlamp

Trailer Tow Module - If Equipped

AHLM

Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle

Temperature Sensor

Power Seats (Driver)

Power Seats (Pass)

Cavity

CB3

Cartridge Fuse

25 Amp

Blade Fuse Description

FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR PWR Window Lockout

* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit

Breaker.

JACKING AND TIRE

CHANGING —

IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.

The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

WARNING!

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.

The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

Jack And Spare Tire Location

The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped) are stowed behind an access panel on the left hand side of the vehicle.

Jacking Equipment Location

Equipment Removal

1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment.

2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire

Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray.

181

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK.

5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

Jacking Equipment

1 — Inflatable Spare Tire

2 — Portable Air Compressor

3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw counterclockwise to collapse from storage area that is located behind the tire.

Jacking Equipment

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

Wheel Blocked

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

182

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.

• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK.

• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

Warning Label

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

NOTE:

Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” in your Owner’s Manual for information about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation.

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body.

Jack Engagement Locations

183

184

Front Jacking Location Engaged

Rear Jacking Location Engaged

WARNING!

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.

The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.

You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated.

3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location.

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.

6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

Installing Compact Spare

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

NOTE:

Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable spare tire.

7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts.

8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi

(4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor or

Tire Service Kit if equipped. Refer to “Portable

Air Compressor” in this section for usage procedure if equipped. Refer to “Tire Service Kit For

Inflating Tire” in this section for usage procedure if equipped.

9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed from the tire valve.

10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in

“Technical Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover assembly in the rear cargo area.

Do not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.

Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.

13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and place the access panel back. The stud of the storage area must be threaded through the lower part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it in place.

NOTE:

Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo area.

185

Road Tire Installation

Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts.

Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine safety.

Wheel Cover Installation

1 — Valve Stem

2 — Valve Notch

3 — Wheel Lug Nut

4 — Wheel Cover

5 — Mounting Stud

WARNING!


5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice.

Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical

Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque.

If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.

7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

Vehicles Without Wheel Covers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine safety.

WARNING!


186

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice.

Refer to “Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Specifications” section for proper wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

Portable Air Compressor —

If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air

Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).

Portable Air Compressor (Top View)

1 — Deflation Button

2 — Pressure Gauge

3 — Power Button

Portable Air Compressor (Bottom View)

4 — Power Plug

5 — Air Hose

Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable

Spare Tire

1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage location.

2. Raise the vehicle as described in the Jacking

Instructions within this section.

187

3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as described in the

Jack Instructions section in this manual. Make sure that the valve stem is located near the ground, and then screw the air hose of the Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.

4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.

5. Always start the engine before turning ON the

Portable Air Compressor.

6. Switch the power button ON.

7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) recommended as per the label on the wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading information label located on the driver-side door opening.

NOTE:

If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button to reduce the tire air pressure.

8. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in the Jack Instructions section in this manual.

9. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the

Portable Air Compressor and place it on the center of the steering wheel.

188

10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area.

WARNING!

• Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by the hose.

• Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in the provided place.

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.

• Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open flames or heat source.

Tire Service Kit For Inflating Tire —

If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service

Kit. Use the Tire Service Kit located in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).

Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power

Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.

Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

WARNING!

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.

WARNING!

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire

Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire

Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service

Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when running the air pump.

Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in the OFF position.

4. Ensure the park brake is engaged.

Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the storage location.

2. Uncoil the Sealant/Air Hose. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting in at the end of the Sealant/Air Hose clockwise onto the valve stem.

3. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

4. Place the Tire Service Kit on the ground next to the deflated tire.

5. Engage parking brake before turning the engine

ON.

6. Always start the engine before turning ON the

Tire Service Kit.

7. Turn the Mode Select Knob to Air Mode position.

NOTE:

Do not fill inflatable spare tire with sealant. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” in this chapter for repairing tires.

8. Switch the power button ON.

9. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) recommended as per the label on the wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading information label located on the driver-side door opening.

NOTE:

If the tire is over inflated, use the deflation button to reduce the tire air pressure.

10. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in the Jack Instructions section in this manual.

189

11. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the

Tire Service Kit and place it on the center of the steering wheel.

12. Return the Tire Service Kit to the foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area.

Return Inflatable Spare Tire

To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.

1. Return the Jack.

2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit or

Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation button to do this step. Refer to “Tire Service Kit” or “Portable Air Compressor” if equipped in this section for additional information. The inflatable spare tire will return to its original shape.

3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original stowage location and position facing outward.

4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed.

5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.

6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor if equipped and tighten the strap.

190

7. Install access panel door.

TIRE SERVICE KIT —

IF EQUIPPED

Tire Service Kit Location

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service

Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F

(-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles

(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is stored in the storage bin located behind the rear cargo trim panel.

Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation

Tire Service Kit (Top View)

1 — Power Plug

2 — Mode Select Knob

3 — Pressure Gauge

4 — Power Switch

5 — Deflation Button

Tire Service Kit (Bottom View)

1 — Sealant Bottle

2 — Hose Attachments

3 — Sealant/Air Hose

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses

Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

Selecting Air Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only.

Selecting Sealant Mode

Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.

Using The Power Button

Push and release the Power Button once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power

Button again to turn the Tire Service Kit off.

Using The Deflation Button

Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle

Replacement” in this section.

• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.

• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit.

• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.

• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal punctures on the tires' side walls.

• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment

(on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select

Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them.

• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

191

WARNING!

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.

– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire

Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire

Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the

WARNING!

skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire

Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit

Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service

Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump.

Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in the OFF position.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.

3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.

4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE:

Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.

Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:

1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire

Service Kit on.

192

2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant

Mode position.

3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant

(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.

NOTE:

Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.

If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0

– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:

1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service

Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the

Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.

2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire Service Kit on.

3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the

Sealant Hose:

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 -

70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the

Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi

(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the

Sealant Bottle is empty.

2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.

Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi

(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within

15 minutes:

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation

Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service

Kit off.

2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel.

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service

Kit in the vehicle storage location. Proceed to

“Drive Vehicle.”

Drive Vehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

193

WARNING!

The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Have the tire checked as soon as possible at your authorized dealer.

After Driving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You

Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before continuing.

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.

3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.

4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.

194

5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the hose onto the valve stem.

6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air

Mode position.

7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the

Pressure Gauge.

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening.

NOTE:

If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.

3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.

4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.

5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel after the tire has been repaired.

6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant

Bottle Replacement”.

NOTE:

When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.

Sealant Bottle Replacement:

1. Unwrap the power cord.

2. Unwrap the hose.

3. Remove the bottle cover.

4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.

5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.

NOTE:

• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse order.

• Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized service centers.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.

Preparations For Jump Start

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Jump Starting Locations

(+) — Remote Positive Post

(–) — Remote Negative Post

The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and place the ignition to

OFF.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

195

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Jump Starting Procedure

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative post near the windshield cowl (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine).

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

196

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative

(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

REFUELING IN

EMERGENCY

The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper storage bin. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.

For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And

Operating” in this manual.

IF YOUR ENGINE

OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The

A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.

If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

WARNING!

You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual

Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

197

In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

Manual Park Release Access Cover

Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual

Park Release:

1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the driver’s seat.

2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the lower left of the steering column.

4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will go, then release it. The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved.

NOTE:

When the lever is locked in the released position, the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the access cover cannot be reinstalled.

5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the driver’s seat.

2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.

3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its original position.

4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.

5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and re-install the access cover. If the access cover cannot be re-installed, repeat steps 1 through 4.

FREEING A STUCK

VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.

NOTE:

Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.

Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:

Push the "ESC Off" switch to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Safety” in the Owner’s

Manual for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

198

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Flatbed

Wheel OFF The Ground

NONE

Front

Rear

ALL

CAUTION!

the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

ALL MODELS

NOT ALLOWED

OK

NOT ALLOWED

BEST METHOD

199

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.

Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

NOTE:

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent

Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park

Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect

Settings.

• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

200

If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).

NOTE:

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Vehicle Recovery Tow Points

Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery

Points that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly seated and secured in the attachment points.

• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained professional only.

• Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled vehicle from its environment.

Front Recovery Points

CAUTION!

Recovery feature:

• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.

• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.

• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.

• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.

Recovery load should:

• Be applied at constant speed.

CAUTION!

• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of the vehicle.

• Not be an abrupt acceleration.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the

ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.

NOTE:

The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park

Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced

Accident Response System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER

(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information on the Event Data

Recorder (EDR).

201

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating

Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to “Instrument

Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” located in the Owner’s Manual.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.

The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or

350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

202

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the required maintenance intervals on the following page.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter

• Rotate the tires

Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses

• Inspect exhaust system

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2 3

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV joints.

Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.

X

X

X

4

X

X

X

5 6

X

X

X

7 8

X

X

X

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

203

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2

Or Kilometers:

3 4 5 6

Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.

Replace spark plugs**

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

X

X

X

X

X

WARNING!

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

7

204

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or

350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

3.6L Engine

1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Fill

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

4 — Engine Air Cleaner

5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

6 — Battery

7 — Engine Oil Dipstick

8 — Windshield Washer Fill

205

RAISING THE VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions,

Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT

Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum

Load

5 — Maximum

Pressure

6 — Treadwear,

Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example:

215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on

U.S. design standards. The size designation for

LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

206

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5

= Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

• "R" means radial construction, or

• "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

207

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 03 means the 3rd week

208

EXAMPLE:

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

• 01 means the year 2001

• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-Pillar

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

209

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

210

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading

Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight

(if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

211

212

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.

WARNING!

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation.

Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

213

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.

Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi

(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F

(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to

40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain

WARNING!

on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.

Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a 1/4 of an inch

(6 mm).

214

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed

Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive

50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat mode

(14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.

NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph

(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

Tire Tread

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).

When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.

215

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

NOTE:

Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear

Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and

Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.

The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire

Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed

Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel

216

WARNING!

sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons

(Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or

MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires —

If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with

Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.

You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe

WARNING!

injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over

75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph

(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

217

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In

Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in

“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information

Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.

Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information

Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

218

Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-

17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.

Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.

When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.

Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only.

Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading

Information Placard located on the driver’s side

B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.

Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used

219

to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,

Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.

Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome

Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or

Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will perma-

CAUTION!

nently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP

AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to

Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

220

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

221

WHEEL AND TIRE

TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt

Torque

100 Ft-Lbs

(135 N·m)

**Lug Nut/

Bolt Size

M12 x 1.5

Lug Nut/Bolt

Socket Size

19 mm

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).

**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Torque Pattern

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

222

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)

3.6L Engines

Engine Oil With Filter

3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API Certified)

Cooling System*

3.6 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula)

* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.

U.S.

19 Gallons

5 quarts

13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling

13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

Component

Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Engine Oil Filter

Spark Plugs

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine

Metric

71 Liters

4.7 liters

12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling

12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.

Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.

We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).

223

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” cool-

Chassis

Component

Automatic Transmission

Brake Master Cylinder

Refrigerant

Compressor Oil

CAUTION!

ant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use

CAUTION!

additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.

Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.

Use only refrigerant R-1234yf

Charge Amounts:

Single A/C System — 1.94 lb (880g)

Dual A/C System — 2.31 lb (1050g)

Use only PAG oil PSD-1:

Single A/C System — 140 ml

Dual A/C System — 190 ml

224

MOPAR ACCESSORIES

Authentic Accessories By Mopar

• The following highlights just some of the many

Authentic Chrysler Accessories by Mopar featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your vehicle.

• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.

• For the full line of Authentic Chrysler Accessories by Mopar visit your local dealership or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for

Canadian residents.

NOTE:

All parts are subject to availability.

EXTERIOR:

• Front Air Deflector

• Hitch Receiver

• Molded Running Boards

• License Plate Frames

INTERIOR:

• Premium Carpet Floor Mats

• All Weather (Slush) Mats

• Premium Carpet Cargo Mat

• All Weather (Slush) Cargo Mat

• Spare Tire Kit

• Body Side Molding

• Roof Rack

• Trailering Accessories

• Mastershield Paint Sealant

• Door Sill Guards

• Roadside Emergency Kit

• Mastershield Fabric Protection

• Roadside Emergency Kit

• Molded Splash Guards

• Side Window Air Deflectors

• Wheel Locks

• Mastershield Undercoating

• Emergency First Aid Kit

• Cargo Area Liner

• Mastershield Leather Protection

• Storage Totes And Coolers

225

ELECTRONICS:

• Remote Start

• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System

CARRIERS:

• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier

• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier

• Roof Mount Kayak Carrier

• Mopar Connect (WiFi)

• Wireless Phone Charger

• Rearview Camera

• Overhead DVD Player

• Roof Mount Bike Carrier

• Tent Kit

• Roof Mount Surfboard & Paddleboard Carrier

• Roof Mount Cargo Carrier

• Roof Mount Canoe Carrier

• Pet Kennel

226

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks.

These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as

Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or

CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com

(U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

– Only connect and use trusted media devices

(e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to ”Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect

Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s

Manual.

227

UCONNECT 4 WITH

7-INCH DISPLAY

Uconnect 4 At A Glance

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio

Screen

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to the screen.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.

228

Setting The Time

1. For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then press the time display at the top of the screen. Press

“Yes.”

2. If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock &

Date” button on the touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option.

3. Press “+” or “–” next to “Set Time Hours” and

“Set Time Minutes” to adjust the time.

4. If these features are not available, uncheck the

Sync Time box.

5. Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the

Clock Setting screen.

Audio Settings

• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen to adjust

Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loudness, AUX Volume

Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off With Door.

• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the

“X” located at the top right.

Balance/Fade

• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.

• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press and drag the

Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.

• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume

• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.

Loudness — If Equipped

• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.

AUX Volume Offset

• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–” buttons. This alters the

AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.

Auto Play — If Equipped

• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touchscreen to activate the Auto Play screen. The Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and “Off.” With

Auto Play on, music begins playing from a connected device, immediately after it is connected to the radio.

Auto On Radio — If Equipped

• The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.

Radio Off With Door — If Equipped

• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off

Delay selected time has expired.

Drag & Drop Menu Bar

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience.

Simply follow these steps:

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

1. Press the “Apps screen.

” button to open the App

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/ shortcut.

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is in

PARK.

229

Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets

2 — Toggle Between Presets

3 — Status Bar

4 — Main Category Bar

5 — Audio Settings

230

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio

6 — Seek Up

7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station

8 — Seek Down

9 — Browse And Manage Presets

10 — Radio Bands

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features,

SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and

SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.

Selecting Radio Stations

• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek through radio stations.

• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station once the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.

Direct Tune

• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the

“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the desired station number.

Store Radio Presets Manually

Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band, press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle between the two sets of six presets.

To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android Auto can be used with

Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android

Auto follow the following steps:

1. Download the Android Auto app from the

Google Play store on your Android-powered smartphone.

2. Connect your Android-powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If you have not downloaded the Android Auto app to your smartphone before plugging in the device for the first time, the app begins to download.

231

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

Your phone may ask you to approve the use of the Android Auto app before use.

Android Auto

3. Once the device is connected and recognized,

Android Auto should automatically launch, but you can also launch it by touching the Android

Auto icon on the touchscreen, located under

Apps.

Once Android Auto is up and running on your

Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:

232

• Google Maps for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music

• Hands-free Calling, and Texting for communication

• Hundreds of compatible apps, and many more!

NOTE:

To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. Once

Android Auto has made a connection through USB,

Android Auto will also connect via Bluetooth.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android

5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on

Google Play. Android, Android Auto and Google

Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

Apple CarPlay Integration —

If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your

Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more.

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage

To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.

2. Once the device is connected and recognized,

CarPlay should automatically launch, but you can also launch it by touching the CarPlay icon on the touchscreen, located under Apps.

Once CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:

To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen.

Apple CarPlay

CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of

Apple Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings such as Key-

Sense, Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On

Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/

Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear

Personal Data, System Information, and Compass

Settings (7–inch Radio Only) through buttons on the touchscreen.

Press the “Apps ” button, then press the

“Settings ” button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that set-

233

ting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. The following feature settings are available:

• KeySense

• Language

• Display

• Units

• Voice

• Camera

• Clock

• Doors & Locks

• Auto-On Comfort

• Engine Off Options

• Audio

• Phone/Bluetooth

• SiriusXM Setup

• Accessibility — If

Equipped

• Reset Menu • Safety & Driving Assistance

• Mirrors And Wipers

• Brakes

• System Information

• Compass (7–inch Radio Only)

• Lights

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” found within “Multimedia” located in your Owner's Manual.

234

TIPS CONTROLS AND

GENERAL

INFORMATION

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

The steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

Left Switch

• Push the switch up or down to search for the next listenable station or select the next or previous CD track.

• Push the button in the center to select the next preset station (radio) or to change CDs if equipped with a CD Player.

Right Switch

• Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume.

• Push the button in the center to change modes

AM/FM/CD/SXM.

Reception Conditions

Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially when you are far away from the broadcaster.

The volume may be increased when receiving traffic alerts and news.

Care And Maintenance

Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational:

• The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which could damage its surface; use a soft, dry, anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the display lens.

• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair.

Anti-Theft Protection

The system is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the vehicle. This guarantees maximum safety.

If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to operate. See an authorized dealer for further information.

AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL

There are numerous USB ports located throughout the vehicle. This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect

Owner’s Manual Supplement.

The data USB ports are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB

Ports

1 — USB Port

2 — Aux Jack

There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this vehicle.

• In the center console

Center Console USB Charging Port

NOTE:

The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel can be switched from “ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details.

• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect

Theater Media hubs

235

• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats

3rd Row USB Charging Port

NOTE:

The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected.

UCONNECT THEATER —

IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect Theater Overview

Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your family years of enjoyment.

There are multiple ways to interact with your

Uconnect Theater system;

• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs

• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or devices into the HDMI port

• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones

• Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video

USB port

• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio

• Project your mobile phone, or tablet screen onto the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens — If

Equipped

Getting Started

Uconnect Theater Screen (Rear

Touchscreens)

1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)

3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (AUX

Output, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only Port)

236

There are three different ways to operate the features of the Uconnect Theater:

• The Remote Control

• The Uconnect System

• The Individual Uconnect Theater Touchscreens

Pairing The Remote

If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect

Theater system, follow the procedure below:

1. Install batteries into both remotes.

2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.

3. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings menu.

4. Press the “Pair Remote” option. Press the “OK” button. A touchscreen notification will appear indicating that your remote has been paired successfully or unsuccessfully.

5. Test to make sure the remote is successfully paired by dragging your finger across the gesture pad. If you do not see the on screen arrow, try using the “Screen” button on the remote to switch between rear screen one and rear screen two to make sure the remote is controlling the intended screen. It may take several seconds for the remote to react when initially paired.

NOTE:

• If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by pushing and holding the Play/Pause, Down arrow, and the

Screen button simultaneously for about five seconds until the back light flashes.

• If the remote is ever non-operational, try repairing the remote.

• The system can accommodate up to ten paired remote controls.

Unpairing The Remote

In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater software, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the remote will need to be unpaired from your

Uconnect Theater system. To unpair the remote:

1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.

2. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the settings menu.

3. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Remote section of "Settings” and follow the on screen instructions to complete the unpairing process.

4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair again.

NOTE:

There will be a touchscreen notification message when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above steps to unpair a second remote.

237

Uconnect Theater Remote Control

Remote Control

1.

Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by running your finger over this area and tapping to select items on the touchscreen, functions similar to a computer/laptop mouse.

2.

Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.

3.

Home Button — Push to access available

“Sources”.

4.

Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow buttons to highlight an item or scroll through menus.

5.

Fast Forward Button — Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.

6.

Play/Pause Button pause disc play.

|| — Begin/resume or

7.

Fast Rewind Button — Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous track.

8.

OK Button — Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.

9.

Screen Selector Button — Push the screen selector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side), or screen 2 (Passenger Side).

10.

Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or return to previous screen.

11.

Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected channel on or off.

12.

Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen

(1 or 2) is being controlled by the remote control.

Replacing The Remote Control Batteries

Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation.

To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote, then slide the battery cover downward.

2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling procedures for your area.

3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery compartment.

4. Replace the battery compartment cover.

238

General Information






NOTE:


Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media

File From Uconnect System

1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc player with the label facing up, or insert a USB drive into rear Video USB port.

NOTE:

The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB port are both located under the radio controls in the instrument panel.

2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the radio touchscreen.

3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls (i.e.

select the desired source from the “Select Input

1” or “Select Input 2” menu for the respective screen).

4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc – press the “Press to Enter” feature in the Movie Snapshot on the radio touchscreen, then press “OK” on the following screen. The steps to start a DVD are dependent on the steps required by that specific DVD. For

USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie, or Folders, then select media title from list(s).

5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens simultaneously, select “Disc” from both screen drop downs, or choose “Disc Source” on one screen and push the “View Screen” button on the other.

DVD Blu-ray Disc Player

1 — Disc Player (Rear)

2 — Rear Video USB Port

239

240

Source Controls From The Uconnect

System — Uconnect Theater

Media Control Screen

NOTE:

After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie Snapshot, the control functions for that screen appears.

These controls only apply to the individual screen selected and include:

1.

Power

Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.

2.

Mute

Mute rear headphones for selected source for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.

3.

Lock

Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions and Rear Touchscreen Controls for the selected source.

4.

View

Select this button to view full screen video if vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled when not viewing a video source or when the vehicle is in motion.

5.

Listen In

Select this button to play one of the rear screens audio over the vehicle’s audio system.

NOTE:

To view video content on the radio screen, bring the vehicle to a stop.

Disc Menu

When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc,

DVD or Blu-ray, pushing the remote control’s arrow buttons will navigate the cursor on the rear touchscreen in the desired direction, on whichever touchscreen is selected. The UP, DOWN, LEFT, and

RIGHT arrow buttons, and the OK and MENU buttons on the remote, along with the corresponding buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can be used to navigate the disc menu when it appears.

This can be used to select specific chapters in a movie, navigate special features, or to play the movie from the menu.

NOTE:

Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the disc if already in the "Disc" source menu on the rear screens, and the disc supports “auto play.”

Uconnect Theater Apps

Apps Home Screen

Sudoku App Home Screen

Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded games. Pressing the “Help” button teaches users how to play each game. Pick from games:

• Back Seat Bingo

• Checkers

• Hanging Fruit

• License Plate Game

• Math Flash Cards

• Solitaire

• Sudoku

• Tic Tac Toe

NOTE:

To exit a game, press “Exit Button” then “Back Arrow,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.

Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 4C NAV

Are We There Yet? App

When a navigation route has been set from the

Uconnect system, the second row passengers can use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen showing distance and time remaining on navigation routes, as well as the estimated time of arrival with pop-up notifications. Notifications and their frequency can be set up for route information by using the arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off using the “Notifications” button on the “Are We

There Yet?” App. Estimated time of arrival notifications pop-up at the bottom center of the screen.

241

Using The Rear Video USB Port

Rear Video USB Port

Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage device and play your favorite music or movies.

NOTE:

To view USB media on the rear theater screens, insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/

Blu-ray disc player. The USB drive port is located under the radio controls in the instrument panel.

Search Screen

On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB device by going to the USB source. Use the search feature to find your music faster.

Play Video Games

Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or

2 ports, located behind the first row seat.

AUX/HDMI/USB

1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)

2 — HDMI Port

3 — USB Port (Charge Only)

NOTE:

Certain high-end video games will exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to

“Power Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in this guide for further information.

242

Headphones Operation

The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screens.

If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, there are a number of things that can be done to troubleshoot the issue:

• Verify that the screen is turned on.

• Check to see that the channel is not muted.

• Make sure that the headphones are on.

• Verify that the headphone channel selector button is on the desired channel. This button switches between the audio of screen 1 and screen 2.

• Install two new AAA type batteries in the headphones.

Uconnect Theater Headphones

1 — Power ON/OFF Button

2 — Volume Control Wheel

3 — Channel Selection Button

The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup.

NOTE:

Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the Uconnect

Theater system is turned off.

Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones

1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones are on the same channel.

2. Push the Home button on the remote control.

3. When the Home menu appears on the touchscreen, use the arrow buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and push the OK button to select the new mode or use the Gesture Pad at the top of the remote control.

243

Uconnect Theater Headphones

1 — Volume Control Wheel

2 — Channel Selection Button

Replacing The Headphone Batteries

Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation.

To replace the batteries:

1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.

244

2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling procedures for your area.

3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery compartment.

4. Replace the battery compartment cover.

Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty

Who Does This Warranty Cover?

This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.

How Long Does the Coverage Last?

This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.

What Does This Warranty Cover?

Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.

What Does This Warranty Not Cover?

This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse, abuse or modification of the

Product other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR

ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS

OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE

OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE

PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY

GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, IN-

CIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-

PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF

ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER.

Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights.

You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

What Will Aptiv Do?

Aptiv, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE

SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT,

SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND

IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EX-

PRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WAR-

RANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT-

NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

If you have any questions or comments regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email [email protected] or phone:

888-293-3332

Display Settings

When watching a video source, pressing “Settings” icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings menu.

These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen.

The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circum-stances.

To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens or remote.

To reset all values back to the original settings, select “Reset to

Defaults”, then select “YES.”

Wireless Streaming — If Equipped

Your Uconnect Theater System may be equipped with Wireless Streaming functionality that allows you to project your smartphone or tablet onto your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens.

This Source

Card will allow you to wirelessly link your compatible Android devices to your Uconnect

Theater system and stream your device onto the touchscreens.

Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen.

Wireless Streaming Source Card

The first row passengers can also access wireless streaming by choosing the source in the Uconnect

Theater menu on the front Uconnect touchscreen.

Streaming Source On Front Uconnect

Touchscreen

NOTE:

For system compatibility, consult your device's

Owner's Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to see if your device supports wireless streaming technology compatibility. Apple devices do not support this feature.

To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens:

1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi.

2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your device. The name of this feature is device dependent and could include: mirror, cast or smart view.

NOTE:

Refer to your device's Owners Manual or www.uconnectphone.com for further information.

3. Select “Pacifica Wireless Network” from the list of available networks on your device.

4. When prompted by an Authentication Screen, press “Accept” on the touchscreen to begin wireless streaming on your device. If prompted, verify that the code on the rear touchscreen and the device match.

245

Streaming Device Source Card

Your phone will be added as an additional source card on the Uconnect Theater touchscreens.

NOTE:

The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which

“Accept” is selected will be the primary controller for the wireless streaming session.

NOTE:

• Some devices will allow you to control your device through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens.

They will react to your selections from the touchscreen and be represented on your device as well.

When supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar will appear at the top and bottom of the Uconnect

Theater touchscreen, framing your streaming device.

• Devices that do not support this feature will not respond to Uconnect Theater touchscreen but can still be controlled using the streaming device.

Settings

Below is a list of the settings available for the Wireless Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater system:

Wireless Streaming Settings

• Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wireless feature of the Uconnect Theater system.

• Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete the paired devices.

• Local Network Name – Allows the user to rename the Pacifica Wireless Network.

Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the

Uconnect YouTube Channel at www.youtube.com/

DriveUconnect for tips and additional information on the Wireless Streaming function.

246

UCONNECT PHONE

Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

1 — Favorite Contacts

2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life

3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone

4 — Siri

5 — Mute Microphone

6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System

7 — Conference Call*

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Phone Menu

8 — Phone Settings

9 — Text Messaging**

10 — Direct Dial Pad

11 — Recent Call Log

12 — Browse Phone Book Entries (Contains SOS

Call)

13 — End Call

14 — Call/Redial/Hold

15 — Do Not Disturb

16 — Reply with Text Message

* — Conference call feature only available on

GSM mobile devices

** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

247

1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone

2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength

3 — Do Not Disturb

4 — Reply with Text Message

5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name

6 — Conference Call*

7 — Phone Pairing

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV with 8.4–inch Display Phone Menu

8 — Text Messaging Menu**

9 — Direct Dial Pad

10 — Contact Menu

11 — Recent Call Log

12 — Favorite Contacts

13 — Mute Microphone

14 — Decline Incoming Call

15 — Answer/Redial/Hold

16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life

17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System

* — Conference call feature only available on

GSM mobile devices

** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)

248

The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phone calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttons on the touchscreen (see

Voice Command section).

The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly.

If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone features.

NOTE:

• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,

Version 1.0 or higher.

• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however some mobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilize all of the Uconnect system features.

• For Uconnect Customer Care: U.S. residents visit

UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.

Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your

Mobile Phone To The Uconnect

System

Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

NOTE:

• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone and software are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit

UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.

• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.

• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.

Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio

Uconnect 4:

Uconnect 4

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.

2. Press the “Phone” button.

3. Select “Settings.”

4. Select “Paired Phones.”

5. Select “Add device.”

• Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting.

249

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV: Pair Your iPhone: Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.

2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar on the touchscreen.

3. Select “Settings.”

4. Select “Paired Phones.”

5. Select “Add device.”

• Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting.

Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device

To search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled iPhone:

1. Press the Settings button.

2. Select Bluetooth.

• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.

Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections.

3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.

250

Pairing Request

1. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone.

NOTE:

Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number.

Select The iPhone's Priority Level

When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone.

Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within

range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.

If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the

Bluetooth device.

Pair Your Android Device:

Uconnect Device

To search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled Android Device:

1. Push the Menu button.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”

• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.

Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections.

5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.

• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check “Do Not

Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can make calls by saying the name of your contact.

Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:

Pairing Request

1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone matches the passkey shown on the Uconnect system then accept the Bluetooth pairing request.

NOTE:

Some mobile phones require the PIN to be entered manually, enter the PIN number shown on the Uconnect screen.

251

Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority

Level

When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone.

Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.

If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the

Bluetooth device.

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system.

Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.

You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on your steering wheel to begin.

NOTE:

Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing and for a list of compatible phones.

Common Phone Commands

(Examples)

• “Call John Smith”

• “Call John Smith mobile”

• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”

• “Redial”

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone

During Call

• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the

Phone main screen, that appears only when a call is in progress, to mute and unmute the call.

Transfer Ongoing Call Between

Handset And Vehicle

• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to transfer an ongoing call between handset and vehicle.

Phonebook

The Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired phone, if this feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time that the phone is connected.

Phonebook entries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings on your phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.

• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing can only be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.

Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are shown in the

Favorites menu.

252

Voice Command Tips

• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs.

Call John) will result in greater system accuracy.

• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for example.

• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to the entire list.

When you hear the command that you need, push the button on the steering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.

Changing The Volume

• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button then say a command. For example, "Help".

• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the

Uconnect system is speaking.

,

NOTE:

The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system.

NOTE:

To access help, push the VR button on the steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR button and say "cancel" to cancel the help session.

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing” on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can also activate it using the

“Do Not Disturb” button at the top of every Phone screen.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to

160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.

Incoming Text Messages

After pairing your Uconnect system with a

Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message

Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming text message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.

To listen to incoming text messages, or any messages currently on the mobile phone, select the

“Messages” menu and press the “Listen” button next to the message you want to listen to.

NOTE:

Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.

253

To Enable Incoming Text Messaging: iPhone

1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.

2. Select Bluetooth.

• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect system.

3. Select

Uconnect.

located under DEVICES next to

4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.

Android Devices

1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Connections.

4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.

• A pop up will appear asking you to accept a request for permission to connect to your messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press

OK.

NOTE:

All incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle will be deleted from the

Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to the

OFF position.

Helpful Tips And Common Questions

To Improve Bluetooth Performance

With Your Uconnect System

Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing:

• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings (Blackberry devices).

• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications that may be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.

• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone.

Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions. This should only be done as a last resort.

Enable Android Device Incoming Text

Messages

254

Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages

Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:

• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and

Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s

Bluetooth connection settings.

• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone.

• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000.

• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — see your mobile phone’s owner manual). This should only be done as a last resort.

Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:

• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the

“phonebook download” request on your mobile phone.

• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.

• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4 system phonebook.

Can’t make a conference call:

• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling. Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.

Making calls while connected to AUX:

• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.

UCONNECT VOICE

RECOGNITION QUICK

TIPS

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your

Uconnect system.

Uconnect 4

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV

255

Get Started

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:

• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.

• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or

Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from the current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone

Call, Send Or Receive A Text

2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio,

Media, Or Climate Functions. For 8.4–inch

System Only: Push To Begin Navigation

Function

3 — Push To End Call

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “ Cancel ” to stop a current voice session

• “ Help ” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• “ Repeat ” to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or

SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite

Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:

• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”

• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

256

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say, “ Help .” The system provides you with a list of commands.

Uconnect 4 Radio

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• “ Change source to Bluetooth”

• “ Change source to AUX”

• “ Change source to USB”

• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest

Hits”; “ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre

Classical”

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your

Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio

Uconnect 4 Media

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media

257

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• “ Call John Smith”

• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”

• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”

• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the

Phone button and say “ Call ,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book.

When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call John Smith work .”

Uconnect 4 Phone

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone

Voice Text Reply — If Equipped

Uconnect announces incoming text messages.

Push the VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “ Listen .” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the VR button or Phone button

(if enabled). After the beep, say: “ Reply .”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY

RESPONSES

Yes.

No.

Stuck in traffic.

See you later.

Start without me.

I’ll be late.

Okay.

Call me.

Where are you?

I will be 5 <or

10, 15, 20, 25,

Are you there

30, 45, 60> yet?

minutes late.

258

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY

RESPONSES

I’ll call you later.

I’m on my way.

I’m lost.

I need directions.

Can’t talk right now.

See you in 5

<or 10, 15, 20,

25, 30, 45, 60> minutes.

Thanks.

NOTE:

Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does not transpose the message.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about

MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple steps: iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle

4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes

Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

Climate

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• “ Set driver temperature to 70 degrees ”

• “ Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees ”

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate

259

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch

Display Climate

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.

The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the

Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests.

260

Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Siri

Eyes Free Available

Using Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to

160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth MAP.

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your

Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate

Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:

• Maps

• Music

• Phone

• Text Messages

• Additional Apps

Android Auto On 7-inch Display

Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running Android

5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google

Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your

“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple

CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button on the steer-

261

ing wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps — if equipped

• Additional Apps — if equipped

Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display

Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of

Apple Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements apply.

General Information






NOTE:


262

Additional Information

© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and

Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US

LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.

Uconnect System Support:

• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)

• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca

or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French)

SiriusXM Guardian services support:

• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091

263

IF YOU NEED

ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 247-9753

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /

(800) 387-9983 French

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: (800) 247-9753

Fax: (787) 782-3345

264

Customer Assistance For The Hearing

Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United

States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial

1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an

Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call

(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.

You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

265

REPORTING SAFETY

DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying

FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or

FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey

Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,

D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer

Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle

Defect Investigations and Recalls at

1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

PUBLICATION ORDER

FORMS

• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual,

United States customers may visit the Chrysler

Contact Us page at www.chrysler.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove

Compartment Material” from the left menu. You can also purchase a copy by calling

1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143

(Canada).

• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the Owner's Manual, may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com (U.S.) or by calling

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143

(Canada).

NOTE:

• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram

Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.

• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/

Service Manuals”. Then select your desired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.

266

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Air Bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . .108, 111

Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . .119, 201

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . .201

Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . .120

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . .109

Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 108, 140

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . .60

Air Pressure

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

INDEX

Alarm

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231, 261

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .223

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232, 261

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Audio Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . .43

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . . .59

Automatic Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

AUX Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . .73

Axle Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

B-Pillar Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Brake Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Brake System

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 174

Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 168

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Caps, Filler

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 197

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . .139

Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 206

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety. . . . . . . .139

Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

267

Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . .132, 135

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . .131

Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . .122

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . .125

Older Children And Child Restraints . . . .123

Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . .137

Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Cooling System

Cooling Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .223

Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . .156

Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86, 87

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

268

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . .48

Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . .87

Dimmer Switch

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253, 260

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 81

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 81

Drag And Drop Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . .236

Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .154

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . .80

Emergency, In Case Of

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .174

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 183, 206

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . .147

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . .205

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .119, 201

Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 142, 174

Filters

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Flashers

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 86, 142

Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 47

Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating. . . . . . . .28

Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . .170

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . .70

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap). . . . . . . . . . . .170

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Hood Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Instrument Cluster

Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . .48

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Inverter

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

iPod/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . .247

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . .44

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . .70

Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 206

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . .44

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Lighter

Cigar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79, 108, 140

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 86, 87

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . .44

Electronic Stability Program(ESP)

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46

High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . .44

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . .83

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

269

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 86, 142

Warning Instrument Cluster

Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81, 86

Loading Vehicle

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Lug Nuts/Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .83

Manual

Park Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Memory Feature (Memory Seats) . . . . . . . .34

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

270

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . .92

Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

MP3 Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . .44

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . .147

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . .223

Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . .87

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Operator Manual

Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . .160, 163

Personalized Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .229

Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Pinch Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . .210

Power

Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . .73

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Power Sliding Door

On / Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21, 67

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . .104

Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Radio

Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . . . . . .14, 17, 21

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 90

Rear ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . .160, 163

Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Remote Keyless Entry

Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .140

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .141

Safety Defects, Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . .266

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 140

Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . .101

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . .101

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . .105

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . .105

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 99, 100

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . .100

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . .101

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 36

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25

Bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . .28

Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .223

Service Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Shifting

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .150

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . .43

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 86, 142

Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 218, 219

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Specifications

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Speed Control

Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . .158

Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

271

Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .154, 156

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15, 143

Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Steering

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . .28

Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 65

Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag . . .109

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . .42

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . .59

Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Time Delay

Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

272

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . .210

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 213, 218, 220

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 206

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

General Information . . . . . . . . . . .213, 218

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 183, 206

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .84, 92

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 213

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 218, 219

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Towing Behind A Motorhome. . . . . . . . . .172

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Transaxle

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 86

Uconnect

Theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display . . . . . . . .228

Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

Making A Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . .255

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . .220

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . .101

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 253

Voice Recognition System (VR) . . .252, 253, 255

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Descriptions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . .219

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim . . . . . . . . . .219

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 48

Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.

It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R TA N T: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/

Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com





If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling

1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.


This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit www.mopar.com

(U.S.), www.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L : Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G !

Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

9/10/18 10:32 AM

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.

To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).

www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca




Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canadian residents).

Chrysler.com

(U.S.)

Chrysler.ca

(Canada)

©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.


CHRYSLER PACIFICA

2019 USER GUIDE

9/10/18 10:32 AM